‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫‪TOPOGRAPHIC MAPS‬‬

‫)ﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﻟﺔ(‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ (Topography‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ " ﻁﺒـﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ " )‬
‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴـﺔ ) ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ( ﻳﻤﻜـﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻹﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺻﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣــﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴــــﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪(Topographic‬‬ ‫ﺙ ) ﺱ ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻉ ( ﺃﻭ )‪ (φ , ξ , λ‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼ ﺓ‬
‫)‪ Maps‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨــــﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (1‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﻗﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼـﻨﺎﻋﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺳـﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﻹﻧﺴـﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨـﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﺜـﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴـــﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﺍﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﻟﻔﻆ "ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳـــﻴﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻠﻄﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳـﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳــﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴــﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳــﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻔﻆ " ﺍﻟﺨـﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴــﺎﺣﻴﺔ "‪ .‬ﻛــﻤﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴــﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳـــﻢ "ﺍﻟﺨــﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺠـﻮﻳـــﺔ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻆ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (1‬ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬

 ‫‪ 1-1‬ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳـﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﻪ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺘﻰ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﺪﻗﻪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﻨﺪﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺍﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺴﻜﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻜﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﻭﺑﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤـﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺴــﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺑﺮﺍﺝ ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻁﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﻣﻮﺭﻓﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﻣﻮﺭﻓﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺭﻳـﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﻪ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴـﻄﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﻮﺍﺳـﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺴـﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺒﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺰﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸـﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷـﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸـﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴـﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺴـﻜﺮﻱ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴـﺔ ﺗﻮﺿـﺢ ﺃﻧﺴـﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳـﻠﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴـﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺳـﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴـﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴـﻠﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌـﺪﻭ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﺿـﺢ ﺍﻷﻣــﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳـﺒﺔ ﻹﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺴـﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘـﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻤـﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴـﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴـﺔ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﺭﻳﺲ ﻭﺃﺷـــﻜﺎﻝ ﺳـــﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴـﻄﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﺘﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳـــﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑـﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳـﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺳـﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺴـﻬﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻁﻨﻲ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺄﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 2-1‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻫﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻬﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ .(2‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻅﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺆﺳـﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (2‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪50000:1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬

‫‪ 1-2-1‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﻣﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻫﻤﻴـﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺴـﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺨـﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺑﺸـﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻭﺳـﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻔﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺆﺧﺬ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺍﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻـﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺨﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻔﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘـﺎﺭﺉ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣـﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻌﺮﻓـﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻋــﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺿـﺢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣـﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴـﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴـﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺓ ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﻁﺮﻕ ﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺳﻨﺘﻨﺎﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـــﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬـــﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺑﻴﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟًﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸــﻜﻞ )‪ .(2‬ﻓﻨﻈﺮًﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳــﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻀﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳـــﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻄﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺯﺩﺣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈـﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑـﺔ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﺼـﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴـﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴـﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳـﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (6‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺳـﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴـﺘﻌﻤﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻠﺨﺺ ﻫـﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑـﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺳـﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (7‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺿــﻊ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳـﻢ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﺷـﻜﺎﻟﻪ ) ﻧﺴـﺒﻲ ‪ -‬ﻟﻔﻈﻲ ‪ -‬ﺧﻄﻲ ‪ -‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ‪ -‬ﺷـﺒﻜﻲ ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺟﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻭﻳﻔﻀـﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺸـﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (8‬ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺳﻬﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﻼﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﻻ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻨﻮﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻛﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ﻛﺴﻬﻢ‬
‫ﻱﺷـﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻁـﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸـﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ) ‪ ،(3‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿـﺢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻁﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻁﻴﺴـﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻁﻴﺴـﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴـﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻼﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻁﻴﺴـﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻁﻴﺴـﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻖﺓ ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻁﻴﺴـﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻷﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳـﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄـﺄ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪﻧﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﺻـﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴـﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺼـﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (3‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬

‫‪ 2-2-1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴـﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼـﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴـﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳـﺘﺔ ﻋـﻨﺎﺻـﺮ ﺭﺋﻴﺴـﻴﻪ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬
 ‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻀـــﺎﺭﻳﺲ‪ :‬ﺗﺸـــﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔـﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔـﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺒــﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴــﻬﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳـــﻄﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻷﺟﺴـﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸـﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴـﺒﺨﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺭﻭﻋـﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤــﺰﺍﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺴـﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﺑﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻀﺮﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺻﻨﻌﻪ ﺍﻹﻧﺴـﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﻛـﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤــﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄـﺮﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴــﻜﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺴﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻈﺎﻫﺮ " ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ "‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈـﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺴـﻴﺎﺳـﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (6‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑـﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺨﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﺬﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻢ ﻭﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴـﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳـﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻻ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﻈـﺮ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻸﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺤﺐ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻄﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﻋــﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،(4‬ﻭﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ "ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭﻳﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻮ ﺧﻂ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺆﺧﺬ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺏ ﺳـﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷــﻜﻞ )‪ (4‬ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﺭﻳﺲ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 60‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ ‪ 60‬ﻣﺘﺮًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺳـــﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،(5‬ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ‪ 60‬ﻣﺘﺮًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﺭﻳﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﺨﻴﺺ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (5‬ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻀﺎﺭﻳﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫• ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺷﻴﺌﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫• ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻼﺷــﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳــﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻮءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫• ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻋﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫• ﻳﻜــﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭﻳﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺘﻮء ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻗﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﺖ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺣﻮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﺞ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﺘﻮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤــﺎ ﺗﺘﺨﺬ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬

‫• ﺗﺘﺨــﺬ ﺧﻄــــﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜــــﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺷــــﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ )‪ (V‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺋﻬـﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺩﻳــــﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ) ﺷــﻜﻞ ‪.(6‬‬

‫ﺷـــﻜﻞ )‪ (6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎء ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ 1-2‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔـﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻜـﻨﺘﻮﺭﻱ )‪ ،(Contour Interval‬ﻭﻳﻘـﺎﻝ ﻋﻨـﻪ ﺃﻳﻀـﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻـﻞ ﺍﻟﻜـﻨﺘﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻫـﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴــﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳــﻴﺔ‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴـﻦ ﺧـﻂ ﺍﻟﻜـﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣـﺪ ﻭﺧـﻂ ﺍﻟﻜـﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠـﺎﻭﺭ ﻟـﻪ‪ .‬ﻓـﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺧﻄـﺎ ﺍﻟﻜـﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠـﺎﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻫﻤـﺎ ﺍﻟﺨـﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨـﻂ ‪ 40‬ﻓـﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻔـﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻜـﻨﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﻓـﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄــﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 2-2‬ﻣﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺳــﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﻈﻬـﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫـﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻓـﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻴـﻮﻣﺮﻓﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﺎﻫـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘـﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫـﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏـﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻫـﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸـﻜﻞ ) ‪ ،(7‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒـﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭﻳـﺔ ﺑﻴــﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴـﺔ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (7‬ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫‪ 3-2‬ﺭﺳـــﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻴﻞــﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ـﺓ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻜﻮﻥــﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻫﻲ‬
‫)ﺱ ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻉ (‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻫـﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ )ﻉ ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(8‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺮﺳـﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪ 10‬ﻭ ‪ 15‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 0 = A‬ﻭﻣﻨﺴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 15 = B‬ﻣﺘﺮًﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻨﺴـﻮﺑﻬﺎ ‪10‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺘـﺎﺭ ﺗﻘـﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ‪ ،AB‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺏ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ .15 = B‬ﻓﻠﻮ ﻗﺴﻤﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ‪ AB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪15‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴـــﻮﺏ ‪ 5‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴــﻮﺏ ‪ 10‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ‪ AB‬ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄـﺘﺎﻥ ‪a‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ .b‬ﻧـﻼﺣﻆ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 10‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ‪ AD‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ‪ DE‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ‪ BE‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ b‬ﻷﻥ ﻣﻨﺴـﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 15 = B‬ﻭﻣﻨﺴـــﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 6 = E‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 10‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴـــﻮﺑﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺴـــﻮﺏ ‪ B‬ﻭﻣﻨﺴـــﻮﺏ ‪ E‬ﻫﻮ ‪ ، 9‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻘﺴـــﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ‪ BE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 9‬ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﻧﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴـــﻮﺏ ‪ 10‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ‪) BE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ .(b‬ﻭﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻤﺮﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 10‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ‪ EF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ c‬ﻭﻳﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ‪ FI‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ . d‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻨﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ‪ .10‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 15‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ B‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴـــﻮﺏ ‪ 15‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ e‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ‪ .CF‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 5‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻨﺸـــﺄ ﺑﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻂ ‪ f‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺏ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻂ ‪ g‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ‪ ،DE‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ h‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.GH‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (8‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬

 ‫‪ 4-2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ )‪ (Profile‬ﻫﻮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻠﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺨﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺳـــﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳــﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻄﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﺘﻘﺎء ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻨﺘــﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻄــﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﺭﻳﺲ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ) ‪ (9‬ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺳــﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ‪.AB‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (9‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫‪ 5-2‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳـــﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﻤﻴﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺸـــﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻧﺴـــﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳـــﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻮﻝ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺴـــﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴـــﻬﻠﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴـــﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﻫﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳـــﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳـــﻬﻼ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻮﻝ ﺑﺸـــﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴـــﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻌــﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳــﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒـﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻓـﻘﻲ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗـﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨـﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌـﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ )ﺹ( ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻌــﺪ ﺍﻟﺴــﻴﻨﻲ )ﺱ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﺴـــﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺴـــﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴـــﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ = ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ × ‪100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺴـــﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴـــﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺴـــﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴــــﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳــــﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴـــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻁﻮﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴــــﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺤﺴـــﺐ ﻁﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺴـــﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴـــﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳـــﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺴـــﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺤﺴـــﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ 1000:1‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳــﻢ ﺍﻟﺨــﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻧﺴـــﺒﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻋــﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ .250000:1‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﻤﻴــﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻁﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﺯﺩﺣﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴـﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪) 10000:1‬ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ (10‬ﻭ ‪ .100000:1‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪) 50000:1‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (11-3‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ 25000:1‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﺣﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (10‬ﺟﺰء ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪10000:1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬

‫‪ 25000:1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻁﻮﻟﻪ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ‪ ،7.5‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺿﻠﻌﻪ ‪ 7.5‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ 50000:1‬ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎ ﺿﻠﻌﻪ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎ ﺗﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
 ‫ﺷـــﻜﻞ )‪ (11‬ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪50000:1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻘﻊ ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺩﺍﺋــﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳـــﺘﻮﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻲ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫‪ 1:24,000‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪﻧﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺍء ﺷـــﻤﺎﻻ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻨﻮﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺳـــﺎﺳـــﻴﺔ )ﺷـــﻜﻞ ‪ ،(12‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 2000‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﺴــﺎﺣﺔ ‪ 7.5 × 7.5‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺟﺮ )ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳـــﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴـــﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ‪ 7.5‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺗﺠﻬﻨﺎ‬
‫ﺷـــﻤﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ 1:24,000‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ‪ 75‬ﻣﻴﻼ ﻣﺮﺑﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻧﺠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻴﻼ ﻣﺮﺑﻌًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ) ‪ (1‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺳـــﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬـــﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻼﺣـــﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠــــﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻫــﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻮﺣـــﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺨـــﺬ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻴﺌـــﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻣﻘﺎﺳــــﺎ ﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـــﺘﻬﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻴﺌـــﺔ ﺃﺧــــــﺮﻯ ﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻨﻒ ﺍﻟﺨــــﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴــﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1000:1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.10,000:1‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫ﺧﺮﺍﺋــــﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳـﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 10,000:1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.100000:1‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ‪.100,000:1‬‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬
 ‫ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﻼﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.40,0000:1‬‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬

‫ﺷـــﻜﻞ )‪ (12‬ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪1:24,000‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ) ‪(USGS‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(1‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪600 × 600‬‬ ‫‪1000:1‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪6×6‬‬ ‫‪10,000:1‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪2.75 × 2.5 10,000:1‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪7.5 × 7.5‬‬ ‫‪24,000:1‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪15 × 7.5‬‬ ‫‪25,000:1‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪7.5 × 7.5‬‬ ‫‪25,000:1‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪15 × 15‬‬ ‫‪50,000:1‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪60 × 30‬‬ ‫‪100,000:1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪1×1‬‬ ‫‪200,000:1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪1.5 × 1‬‬ ‫‪250,000:1‬‬
 ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘــﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻌـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ) 1000:1‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (13‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪) 5000:1‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،(14‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .500:1‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻴـﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘـﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻁﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (13‬ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪1000:1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (14‬ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪5000:1‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬

‫‪ 4‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻄﻲ )‪ (Cartographic Generalization‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄــﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳــﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺼﻠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺯﺩﺣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺻﻌﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮء ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﺤﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺯﺩﺣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻــﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘـــﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻟﻜﺜﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣـــﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺑﺼـﺪﻕ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـــﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠــﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻟﻐـــﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﻬــــﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧـﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛــﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣـــﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻄﻲ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻭﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻋﺪﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻱ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺃﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻤﺔ ﺃﺻﻼ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻭﻳﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻄﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﻀﻄﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
 ‫)‪ (3‬ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻫﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴــﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (6‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﺼﻨﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛــﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﻀــﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻤــﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨــﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌــﺔ ﺃﻗﺴـــﺎﻡ ﺭﺋﻴﺴــﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺴـﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﺑﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻕ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺒﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻄﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸـــﻜﻞ ) ‪ -15‬ﺃ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻤﺔ ) ﺏ ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻤﺔ ) ﺝ (‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﺳﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ) ﺏ ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﺿﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ) ﺝ ( ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ) ﺏ (‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (15‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬

‫‪ 1-4‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻄﺤﺔ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ) ‪ (16‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺳﻜﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌـﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨـﺪ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌــــﺎﻟﻢ ﻳﺠـﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒـﺎﻩ ﺇﻟــﻰ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻛﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (16‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻄﺤﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺷﺎﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺧﺒﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻄﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻤــﺜﻼ ﻟﻮ ﻛــﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺷﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﺧـﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ 10000:1‬ﻭﻅـﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴــــﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ 50000:1‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄـﺔ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴــﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـــــــــﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻢ ﻣﺒﻨﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ؟ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺷﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ـــــــــــــ‬
‫ﻡﻙ‬
‫ﻥ ﺹ = ﻥ ﻙ × ‪ \/‬ــــــــــــ‬
‫ﻡﺹ‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ ‪ ،‬ﻥ ﺹ = ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬

‫ﻥ ﻙ = ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ‬

‫ﻡ ﻙ = ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ‬

‫ﻡ ﺹ = ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬

‫ﻓﻠﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘــﻞ ﻣﺜــﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄــــﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ 25000:1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﻳﻄـــــﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴـــﺎﺱ ‪ 50000:1‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻘــــﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ ، 25000:1‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(2‬‬
 ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ‪25000:1‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ‪ 50000:1‬ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ‪:250000‬‬

‫‪250000:1‬‬ ‫‪25000:1‬‬ ‫‪50000:1‬‬ ‫‪25000:1‬‬

‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺒﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ) ‪ (17‬ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸــﻜﻞ ﻋـــﺎﻡ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴــــﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺷــﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼـــﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴـــﻄﺤﻲ ﻫـﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺼـﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﻓﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌـﺎﺭﻳﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻲ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜــــﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻮﻝ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑـــــﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ) ‪ ( 17-3‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ 2-4‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮﻧﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ) ‪ ،( V‬ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗـﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻁﺮﻕ‬
 ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺃﻋﺪﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘـﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻄﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻋﻠﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳـﻮﺑﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻛـﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜــﺜﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻤـﻴﻢ ﺧﻄــﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﺳــﻴﺐ ) ‪ ( DEM‬ﺣﺎﺳـــﻮﺑﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺭﻓﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (Mathematical Morphology‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎء ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )‪ .(Geo-statistics‬ﻭﺗﻮﻅﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳـــﻮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (Digital Image Processing‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌــﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨـــﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴــــﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨــﺬ ﺑﺪﺍﻳـــﺔ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳـــــﺔ ﻷﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸـــﺎﻛﻞ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸــﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴــــﺔ ﻟﻸﺳــــﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻤـﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻨﻌﻴﻢ )‪ (Smoothing‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴــــﺒﺔ ﻟﺨﻄـﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜـﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻫـﻮ ﺗﻤـﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫)‪ (Mathematical Filter‬ﻓﺘﻘــﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺼـﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤـﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴـﺔ ﻟﻸﺳــﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧــــﻼﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻴـــﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴــﺔ‬
‫ﻫـــﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻘﻠﻬــﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻌﻴﻤﻬـــﺎ ﻟﺘﺼـــﺒﺢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺳـــﻬﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﺴــﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﺮﻳﺤــــــﺔ ﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻅﺮﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻄﻴﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴـﺔ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳـﻮﺑﻲ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻴﺎﺕ"‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺒﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (18‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳـــﻮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (18‬ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﺳﻮﺑﻴﺎ‬

‫ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻣﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ)‪ ،(DEM‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻲ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻊ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ )‪ (Nines Filter‬ﻭﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪C(d) = exp ( - a2 × d2‬‬
‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ )‪ C(d‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ = (a‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0.04‬ﻭ ‪ ، 4.0‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴـــﺎﻭﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ 4.0‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ = (d‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴـــﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺴـــﺎﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺴــﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 1.00‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴـــﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 1.414‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴــﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻌﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ) ‪ (a‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 0.04‬ﻭ ‪ 0.30‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 0.64‬ﻭ ‪ 0.83‬ﻭ ‪ .4.00‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺸﺮﻁ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ .4‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫‪Moving Unweighted‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 0.04‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﻣﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻭﻥ" )‬
‫‪ .(Average Filter, MUAF‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤـــﺔ ‪ 0.83‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳـــﻢ "ﻣﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳـــﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻭﻥ")‪ . (Moving Binomially Weighted Average Filter, MBWAF‬ﻓﻠﻮ ﺍﺳـــــﺘﻌﻤﻠﻨﺎ "‬
‫ﻣﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳـــﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻭﻥ" ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 0.04‬ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ) ‪ (a‬ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ )‪ (MUAF‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪:‬‬

‫‪0.11099 0.11117 0.11099‬‬

‫‪0.11117 0.11135 0.11117‬‬

‫‪0.11099 0.11117 0.11099‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎ ‪ ،1.00‬ﻭﻫـﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒـﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴـﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨــﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻧﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﻴﺴـــﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪ 1.00‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ = ‪ 0.99840‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻨﻴﺔ = ‪ 0.99681‬ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴــﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪8.9808256 = 0.9968051×4 + 0.9984013×4 + 1.00‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ = ‪0.11135 = 8.9808256 ÷ 1.00‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ = ‪0.11117 = 8.9808256 ÷ 0.99840‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻨﻴﺔ = ‪0.11099 = 8.9808256 ÷ 0.99681‬‬

‫‪ 0.83‬ﻛﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ )‪ (a‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻫﻮ )‪ (MBWAF‬ﻭﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺸــﻜﻞ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳــﺘﻌﻤﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬

‫‪0.06277 0.12500 0.06277‬‬

‫‪0.12500 0.24894 0.12500‬‬

‫‪0.06277 0.12500 0.06277‬‬

‫ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴـــﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳـــﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ =‬
‫‪ 0.83‬ﻫﻲ ‪ ، 4.017043‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ = ‪1.00‬‬

‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺼﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ )‪ (a‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪.11099‬‬ ‫‪.11117‬‬ ‫‪.11099‬‬ ‫‪.10445 .11429 .10445‬‬ ‫‪.08311 .12207 .08311‬‬

‫‪.11117‬‬ ‫‪.11135‬‬ ‫‪.11117‬‬ ‫‪.11429 .12505 .11429‬‬ ‫‪.12207 .17929 .12207‬‬

‫‪.11099‬‬ ‫‪.11117‬‬ ‫‪.11099‬‬ ‫‪.10445 .11429 .10445‬‬ ‫‪.08311 .12207 .08311‬‬

‫‪a = 0.04‬‬ ‫‪a = 0.30‬‬ ‫‪a = 0.62‬‬

‫‪.07953‬‬ ‫‪.12295‬‬ ‫‪.07953‬‬ ‫‪.06277 .12500 .06277‬‬ ‫‪.04492 .12210 .04492‬‬

‫‪.12295‬‬ ‫‪.19007‬‬ ‫‪.12295‬‬ ‫‪.12500 .24894 .12500‬‬ ‫‪.12210 .33191 .12210‬‬

‫‪.07953‬‬ ‫‪.12295‬‬ ‫‪.07953‬‬ ‫‪.06277 .12500 .06277‬‬ ‫‪.04492 .12210 .04492‬‬

‫‪a = 0.66‬‬ ‫‪a = 0.83‬‬ ‫‪a = 1.00‬‬

‫‪.007758 .017189 .007758‬‬ ‫‪.00031 .01704 .00031‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬

‫‪.017189‬‬ ‫‪.68211‬‬ ‫‪.017189‬‬ ‫‪.01704 .93058 .01704‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪1.000‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬

‫‪.007758 .017189 .007758‬‬ ‫‪.00031 .01704 .00031‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬

‫‪a = 1.50‬‬ ‫‪a = 2.00‬‬ ‫‪a = 4.00‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﺳــﻴﺐ )ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ) ‪ (19‬ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (19‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪Phillip Muehrcke, Association of American Geographers, Resource Paper No. 19, 1972 :‬‬

‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺌــﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺗﺴـــﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘــﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻁﺔ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 40‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ½ : 1‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 160‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ،250000:1‬ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 650‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .100000:1‬ﻭﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺼــﺮًﺍ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺒﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍ ﻳُ ْﻤـﻜـﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳـــﻄﺘﻪ ﺍﻹﺷـــﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳ َﻤـ ّﻜـﻦ ﻣﻦ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻁﺮﻕ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻤﻠﺖ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ 25000:1‬ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ 50000:1‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ 100000:1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 1-5‬ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗُ ْﺨﺘﺎ ُﺭ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻁﻮﻝ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴــــﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺰﻳـــﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗــﻴﻢ ﺑﻤﻘـــﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎ ﻭﺍﺣـــﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻــــﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﻟﺘﺴـﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﻧﺎ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻲ )ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻓﻴﻤﻜـــﻦ ﺗﺴـــﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣـــﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸـــﻜﻞ ) ‪ ( 20‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷـﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻕ‬ ‫‪4 -1‬‬ ‫)ﺃ(‬

‫ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺷﺮﻕ‬ ‫‪4 -2‬‬ ‫)ﺏ(‬
‫ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺷﺮﻕ‬ ‫‪0 -3‬‬ ‫)ﺝ(‬
‫ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﻏﺮﺏ‬ ‫‪2 -3‬‬ ‫)ﺩ (‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﻝ ﻏﺮﺏ‬ ‫‪2 -0‬‬ ‫)ﻫـ(‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻕ‬ ‫‪0 -0‬‬ ‫) ﻭ(‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (20‬ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ 2-5‬ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺴـــﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫــﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄــﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤــﺮﺑﻊ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘـــﺎﺱ ) ‪ 1‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ × ‪ 1‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺣـــﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻛــﺎﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳــــﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳـــﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ )ﺍﻷﺳــﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸــﻜﻞ ) ‪ (21‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ) ‪ 12‬ـ ‪ ،(30‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺷــﻤﺎﻝ ﺷــﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻴﻬـﺎ ﺧــﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ‪ 12‬ﻣﻊ ﺩﺍﺋـﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌـﺮﺽ ‪ .30‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﺴــﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑـﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪.4 , 3 , 2 , 1‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌــــﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﻬﺎ ‪ ,4 , 3 , 2 , 1‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺴـــﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺣــــﺮﻑ ﻟﻠــﺪﻻﻟــــﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧــﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄــﺔ ) ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺟﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻮﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ) ‪ ( 21‬ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﻁ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ 3-5‬ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛــــﺜﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺗـ ُ َﻌـﺮّﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴــﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻺﺷـــﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻘﺴـــﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﺴـــﺎﺣﺔ ) ‪ 1‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ × ‪ 1‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 64‬ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸـــﻜﻞ )‪ (22‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (22‬ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬

‫‪E-32-12‬ـ ‪ -1‬ﻁ ‪25‬‬ ‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣـــﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴـــــﺎﺱ ‪25000:1‬‬

‫‪ – 5- B -32-12‬ﻁ ‪50‬‬ ‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣـــﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴـــــﺎﺱ ‪50000:1‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣــــﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴـــﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴـــﺎﺱ ‪ 4- E – 32 – 12 100000:1‬ﺝ ‪100‬‬
 ‫‪ 4-5‬ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻁﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺷﺮﻁﺔ ﻁﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ 4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ 6‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ : 1‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸـﻜﻞ )‪ (23‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ،NH-33‬ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪1.0 × 1.5‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ،250000:1‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣـــﺔ ‪ ، NH-33-13‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺴــﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ‪ A , B , C , D , E , F‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ 100000:1‬ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴـــﺎﺣﺘﻬﺎ ‪ 30 × 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘــﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ . NH-33-13-F‬ﻭﺗﻘﺴــﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧــﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟـﻰ ﺃﺭﺑـﻊ ﻟﻮﺣــﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻴــﺎﺱ ‪ 50000:1‬ﺗﺄﺧــﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ NH-33-13-F-2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ‪ a ,b ,c, d‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ ، 25000:1‬ﻭﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ) ‪NH -‬‬
‫‪.( 33 - 13 - F - 2 - d‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ)‪ (23‬ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻁﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ 5-5‬ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻁﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﺩﻳﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ )‪ (NGS‬ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴـﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸـــﻜﻞ ) ‪ (24‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘـــﺔ ) ‪ ،(NGS‬ﻭﺗﺴـﺘﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻁﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴـﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﺩﻳﺴـﻴﺔ( ) ‪ (National Geodetic Survey‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻛــﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺸـﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﻮ ‪ ،037077-122-T25‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫)‪ (T25‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪.25000:1‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(24‬ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻁﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﺩﻳﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬

‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬

‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻫﺎﻣــﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸــﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺨﺮﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻴﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴــﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻀـﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺴﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻳــﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺨــﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻐــﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 1-6‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻁﺮﻕ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺷــﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸــﺮﻭﻉ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓــﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟــﻤﺆﺛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸــﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 2-6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻧﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺪﻋﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻁﺮﺡ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻞ ﻧﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻓﻌﻼ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ؟ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ؟‬
 ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ؟ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ؟ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ؟ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ؟‬

‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ؟ ﻭﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻞ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ؟‬

‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ؟ ﻭﻣﺎ‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ ؟ ﻭﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ؟ ﻭﻛﻢ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ؟ ﻭﻫﻞ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫)‪(5‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ؟‬

‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ؟‬ ‫)‪(6‬‬

‫‪ 3-6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻄﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺃﺳﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﻣﺸـﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺨﺮﻳﻂ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺒﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ـﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺨﺮﻳﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺧﺒﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬﺓ ﻭﻓِ َ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 4-6‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳـﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻄﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘـﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺨﺮﻳﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴـﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻁﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬـــﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫــﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳـــﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺳــﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 50000:1‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬
‫‪ / × 250‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ =‬

‫ﻭﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻱ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ % 5 - 2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 5-6‬ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺍﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﺩﻳﺴﻲ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻳﻄــﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺳﺎﻫﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻧﻲ )‪ (GPS‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺴـﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻁﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻱ ﻭﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ % 35 – 30‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤــﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸــﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 6-6‬ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ )‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﻅﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﺧﺬ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ % 40 – 35‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸـﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪ 7-6‬ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸــﻤﻞ ﺭﺳــﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴـﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳــﻮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳــﻮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤــﺎﻝ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ % 25 – 20‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤــﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸــﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 8-6‬ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻭﻁﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻓﺴﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ % 5 – 2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘـﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨــﺎﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳـﻊ ﻭﻫـﻲ ﺗﻤﺜــﻞ ﺣــﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪2 – 1‬‬
‫‪ %‬ﻣـﻦ ﻗﻴﻤــﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸـــﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (7‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳــﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘـﺮﺓ ﻁﻮﻳﻠـﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺗﺤﺘـﺎﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ )‪ (Updating‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺇﻻ‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﻫﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﺤﺮ ﻭﺛﻮﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻛﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﻀﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻼﻣﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎء ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻲ ﻣﺜﻼ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﺬﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻀﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺗﺠﺴﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ــــﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌـــﺪ ﺍﻟﺜــﺎﻟﺚ ﻣــﻦ ﺧﻄــﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺖ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪.1962‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸــﻜﻞ )‪ (25‬ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻁﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺕ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1946‬ﺛﻢ ﺣُـ ّﺪﺛَ ْ‬

‫)ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (25‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬